Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

1 .Introduction In this tutorial. Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

fixtures. and plumbing fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. such as duct. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and plumbing engineering workflows. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and piping. Germany. Add basic MEP elements. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. 3 . electrical. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. electrical panels. such as mechanical equipment. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles.

On the Contents tab. When you open a training file. however. to provide a richer and more finished design. your Training folder may be in a different location. is located and accessed in the training files location. and tags. you can choose to save your work. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Metric: files for users working with metric units. For example. views. After completing each exercise. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. annotations. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. when you add ductwork. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. and sheets to document the project. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. When you install the training files as instructed. Create schedules. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. NOTE Depending on your installation. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. you learn where the training files are located. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Create detail views. Metric file names have an _m suffix. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. such as templates and families. In this exercise. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. However. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. For example. Contact your CAD manager for more information. as well as how to open and save them. You do not design entire systems. So. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. templates.

A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.rvt and make changes. scroll down. verify that Project Files (*. select the folder in which to save the new file.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. and click the Training Files icon. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. depending on the instructions in the tutorial.rvt) is selected. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 4 Click the training file name. For File name. a list of file types displays. double-click Imperial or Metric. you are prompted to save the changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. and click Open. For Files of type. the Open dialog displays. click ➤ Save As. 3 In the right pane. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. if you open settings. and you can open any supported file type. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. enter the new file name. and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For example. Accessing Training Files | 5 .rvt. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 8 If you have made changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes.

6 .

Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In the Revit MEP model. the hierarchy of elements. As you work in drawing and schedule views. ■ ■ 7 . The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In this case. sections. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and plans. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. scope. every drawing sheet. drawing sheets.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the operation of the software is parametric. the parameter is one of association or connection. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. In this case. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. You learn the terminology. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. schedules. quantities. the floor or roof remains connected. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. If the length of the elevation is changed. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. drawings. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. hence. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and phases when you need it. If you move the partition. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the door retains this relationship to the partition. 2D and 3D view. and schedules required for a building project.

For example. When you change something. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. sprinklers.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and electrical panels. dimensions. tags. For example. ducts. Examples include detail lines. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. tags. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. For example. walls and ceilings are hosts. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. They help to describe or document the design. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. ducts. and 2D detail components. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. dimensions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. boilers. levels. sinks. boilers. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. grids. and electrical panels. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and keynotes are annotation elements. sprinklers. sinks. filled regions. Datum elements help to define project context. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example.

Most often. views of the project. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. schedules. This information includes components used to design the model. Often. from geometry to construction data. first floor. To place levels. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and drawings of the design. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Project: In Revit MEP. section views. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. families. for example. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you do nothing to establish these relationships. such as roofs. The project file contains all information for the building design. you must be in a section or elevation view. By using a single project file. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. or bottom of foundation. programming is not required. In other cases. and so forth). the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you can explicitly control them. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. If you can draw. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. floors. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. North . For example. However. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and ceilings.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. In Revit MEP. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. and types. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. elevation views. top of wall.

A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Then experiment with them. and similar graphical representation. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. You can also display several project views at one time. identical use. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. System families can be transferred between projects. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. showing. Unlike system and standard component families. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. A type can also be a style. each in-place family contains only a single type. However. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. For example. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. System families include ducts. Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family. With a few clicks. For example. For example. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. pipes. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. or layer the views to see only the one on top. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. such as a A0 title block. and wires. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). hiding. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface.

Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. To return the panel to the ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.

architect-specific tools. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for editing existing elements. project and system parameters. then select what you want to modify. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. data and systems. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools used for adding 2D information to a design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and settings.. tools used for running analysis on the current design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and CAD files. select the tool first. and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.. When working on the Modify tab.

application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. For example. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. To keep a panel expanded. closes the application menu (double-click). when adding duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. By default. displays frequently used tools. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. provides access to common tools. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). provides requested information. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct.

...The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. select a template and create a new drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click. (Export) On the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Open) save the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish. select a file to open..

customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Licensing) close the file. or template file. annotation. Camera. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. saves a current project. or template file.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. and Walkthrough. family. to. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Publish) print the current drawing. but is not enabled by default. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. click. To enable or disable a tool item.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. publish the current project.On the application menu.. (Print) access product and license information. provides views including Default 3D. annotation.

the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Starting with the most recent command. Clipboard. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. check the Status Bar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. To hide the Status Bar. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down.To undo or redo a series of operations. displaying the same information. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. In addition. Group. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. repeat the command. When you are highlighting an element or component. workshared components. when you switch to another editing mode. However. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). When you are using a command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Modify. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. or the Family Editor. This displays the command history in a list. To show the Status Bar again.

When you place an element in a drawing. To change existing elements to a different type. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Modify). select one or more elements of the same category. Place a Wall. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. for example. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.To cancel or exit the current command.

you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. After you are familiar with these tasks. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click Training Files. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. For example.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. There are several ways to access zoom options. In the following steps. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu.rvt. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 Click ➤ Open. Zoom the view In the tutorials. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.

NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. When you release the mouse button. 6 Click in the drawing area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. click . the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE As you zoom in and out. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. the view zooms in on the selected area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Modifying the View | 19 . use a zoom menu command to zoom out. on the Navigation bar. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. To modify or add snap increments. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. In the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.

The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Click and drag to orbit the design. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. ➤ Options. moving the wheel to the desired location. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. press ESC. 14 To exit the wheel.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. As you move the mouse. click the SteeringWheels tab. and then using the Zoom tool again. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. For more information about SteeringWheels. and click tin the Options dialog.

Similar controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.HVAC Plan . and open Level 2 . display along the ends. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design. called drag controls.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. as shown. Small blue dots. and select the duct. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. After you are familiar with these tasks. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . bottoms. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 2 Enter ZR. referred to as shape handles. These are the drag controls.

NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All changes you make to a project are tracked. or press CTRL+Z. 6 On the Undo menu. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the Undo command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. In this example. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. select the first item in the list. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. on the Standard toolbar.

and click again to specify the ending position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. as shown. 11 With the duct already selected. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. for example. In this case. The duct is moved to the new position.Some commands. such as Move and Copy. and drag it to the left as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. you want to move the duct. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .

End a command Some commands.Supply. 14 Enter VG. 13 To end a command.Return. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . such as the Modify Ducts command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Click OK. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Press ESC twice. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Select Mechanical . Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. For example. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

link files. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. 5 In the New Project dialog. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and open North. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Finally. 2 In the New Project dialog. New projects inherit all the families. and loadable families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. click Training files. In that case. such as the default project units and settings. You can either select a template from the template library.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. under Create new. and open Metric ➤ Templates. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 27 . you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. you learn how to start a project from a template. You can choose from several templates. system families.rte template. such as ducts and pipes. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. under Template file. use copy/monitor. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 7 In the Project Browser. and geometry from the starting template. and click Open. and modify system settings. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 6 Click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. create and manage views. such as coordination review and interference checking. settings. click Browse. select Project. the default building levels and standard views. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings.

and select the Systems-Default_Metric. 10 Using the same method. for Energy Data. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click Browse. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select Manchester. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click (Browse). For example. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. you can select it now. select School or University. click Edit. create another new project using the Construction template. If you want to use a template other than the default. select Project template. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. navigate to Metric Templates. for City. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file.8 In the drawing area. select Level 1. NH. Click Cancel. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. ■ ■ Under Create new. Click OK twice. under Energy Analysis. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. In the Choose Template dialog. To maintain office standards and reduce rework.rte template and click Open. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ■ For Building Construction. review the construction materials listed. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. (Browse). For Location. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. When you select the material. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template.

30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Holding CTRL. 24 In the right pane. Click OK twice. plumbing. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and fire protection systems. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 140. 140. 22 In the right pane. and 310. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.00 mm. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.00 mm.00 mm. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 23 In the left pane. 26 In the right pane.000 mm. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. power distribution systems. wiring. and demand factors for electrical systems. 260.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 290. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Sizes. click Rectangular. click Round. for 20. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 90. under Duct Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 25 In the left pane. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. select Identity Data.00 mm. 110. 27 Click OK.00 mm.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. 110. 33 Click OK. click Wiring.00 mm.00 mm. under Duct Settings. under Pipe Settings. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. piping. for 90. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. After standard settings have been established for an organization.00 mm. For Categories. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. select Views.00 mm.rfa and click Open.

5 Click OK. select Associated Level. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. families. To enable this coordination.rvt. click Training. From the Positioning list. select Auto . sheets.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select View Name. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. click Browse. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. under Create new. select Project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Origin to Origin. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Sort by. In addition. Linking Projects In this exercise. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Select Ascending Click OK twice. and groups that are contained in a project. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. For Then by. 4 In the New Project dialog. Click Open. under Template file. 38 Close the file. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Family and Type. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Sub-Discipline. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. For Then by. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders.

8 If necessary. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. under Constraints.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. select the linked architectural model. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . Linking Projects | 31 . select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.Mech.

21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.Floor. 19 On the left side of the view.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. click Plan View types. click the level line for 03. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 17 On the Options Bar.

click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. 29 In the drawing area. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. indicating that a relationship is established. a warning message displays. level 3. select Custom. click By Host View. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. and the level 4. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. and that the copied elements are monitored. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. warnings notify you of any violations.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. 34 On the Basics tab. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. appears above the copied elements. 27 In the drawing area. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. indicating that an element has changed. highlight the linked model. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. After copying. and click to select the linked model. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. If you modify a monitored element. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. for the link file. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. Linking Projects | 33 . or both original monitored and copied elements have changed.

for Name. under View Properties. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. click Custom.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. click Edit. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 36 Click OK. click Custom. Click OK. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Select Show categories from all disciplines. select Custom. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Planting. Under Visibility. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Site. and Topography. 5 On the Basics tab. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. deselect Parking. Under Visibility. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. for the link file. Roads.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. 7 Click OK twice. deselect Levels. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. Click OK. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 3 In the View templates dialog. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 2 In the New View Template dialog.

selection default options. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. they are not saved to project files or template files. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. Notice that the drawing area is black. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. 7 Click OK. 5 In the New Project dialog. under View Templates. notification preferences. and your username when using worksharing. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.rte. 8 Click ➤ Options. select Invert background color. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click the Graphics tab. click Training Files. Modifying System Settings | 35 . you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. click Browse. journal cleanup options. select Mechanical and click OK. and click OK. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. 9 In the Options dialog. under Template file. These settings control the graphics. 3 Under Colors. click the Graphics tab.

2 In the Options dialog. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 11 In the Color dialog. 14 Click OK. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. the elements causing the error display using this color. 21 Close the file without saving it. 18 Select the wall. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Under Notifications. click the value for Selection color. you specify default file locations. However. including your default project template. select One hour. family template files. and click OK. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . When an error occurs. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color.10 Under Colors. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. and family libraries. select yellow. For Tooltip assistance. select None. click the File Locations tab. 12 Click the General tab. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red.

or loading a Revit MEP file. Specifying File Locations | 37 . 4 Click Cancel. click Browse. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. note the list of library names. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and Import dialogs. 10 In the Places dialog. TIP To view a template. When you are opening. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and click Open. However. 7 In the Options dialog. 5 Under Default path for user files. Load. You can modify the existing library names and path. such as in a large. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Save. and you can create new libraries. under Default path for family template files. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. click Places. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. select the folder to save your files to by default. you can start a new project with that template. click Browse. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. In the following illustration. saving.3 Under Default template file. centralized. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Click and click Browse to select a template.

click the My Library icon. 15 Under Library Name. TIP You may want to create a new folder first.11 In the Places dialog. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. or families. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and select it as the library path. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. ➤ Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Add Value). and click Open. Load. Save. click My Library. templates. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and Import dialogs. and click OK twice. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and change the name to My Library. and click (Browse).

4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Edit. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 8 Under Building industry dictionary.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. If you want to relocate this path. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 19 Click Cancel. 22 Select My Library. 9 In the text editor. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 3 Under Settings. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 14 Click in the drawing area. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 11 In the Options dialog. This path is determined during installation. view the current path. click OK. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. such as bump maps. select Ignore words in uppercase. 5 In the text editor. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. custom color files. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 21 On the File Locations tab. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. If you work in a large office. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 20 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 2 In the Options dialog. 12 Create a new project using the default template. click the Spelling tab. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . click Places. and decal image files. specify the new location here. 27 Click OK. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 23 Click 24 Click OK.

20 Under Settings. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and enter 500 . 21 Under Personal dictionary. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . you modify snap increments. 2 In the New Project dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.17 In the Spelling dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. click the Spelling tab. 25 Close the file without saving it. click Close. under Template file. click Edit. click Training Files. click OK. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.. under Dimension Snaps. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .rte. As you zoom in and out within a view. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 6 In the Snaps dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. In this exercise. you modify snap settings. 23 In the text editor. 19 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. work with snapping turned off. 22 In the text editor. delete sheetmtl-CU. 18 Click ➤ Options. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.

enter SM. click OK. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. deselect Chain. zoom out until it does so. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. TIP To zoom while sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. snapping reverts to the system default settings. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. This is the increment that you added previously. For example. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. use the wheel button on your mouse. While sketching. and move the cursor to the right. such as ZO to zoom out. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu.7 Under Object Snaps. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If it does not. 10 On the Options Bar.

Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. with or without saving it. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and specify the wall endpoint. the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 22 Move the cursor downward. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Do not set the wall end point. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and the wall edges. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. If you move the cursor along the wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 26 Close the file. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and move the cursor to the right. it will snap to the endpoints. 19 Enter SM. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and delete the value 500 . Notice that snapping is once again active. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 25 Click OK.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you design a mechanical system for an office building. methodology. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you can choose to save your work. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you first plan the system. If the tutorial training files are not present. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. After applying a color scheme to the zones. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. As you create the mechanical system. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. water source heat pump (WSHP). In this lesson. 45 . you will understand the process. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This system consists of a cooling tower.autodesk. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. After finishing each exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and then you create a plenum level. At the end of the tutorial. In this exercise. However. you first configure the linked architectural model. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Room Bounding. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. click to select it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . you add a level for plenums. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. Next. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. under Constraints. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and double-click West . and click OK. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. In this section.Space Plan is highlighted. not in the MEP training file. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . roof.MEP. 6 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). NOTE When working with a linked file. and after the linked model highlights. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ceilings. These components are defined in the architectural training file.

15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 9 On the Draw panel. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Esc. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and enter Level 2 Plenum. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Preparing Spaces | 47 . For Offset. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). The new level is placed. and in the Plan View Types dialog. and click Properties. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. Click Plan View Types. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. right-click Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. enter 2600mm. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

and for Offset.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. Under Identity Data. In the next exercise. you can choose to save your work. select Plenum Plan. In this exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Design. For Cut plane. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. NOTE After finishing each exercise. For Sub-Discipline. for Default View Template. click Edit. ■ Click OK twice. for Level. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for View Range. Under View Depth. enter an Offset of 300mm. However. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. select Level Above (Level 3). In this exercise.Plenum. For View Classification. enter 0. for View Scale. for Top. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. you place spaces in areas of the building model.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under Extents. select MEP . and click Apply Default View Template. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.

select Horizontal. For (Tag Location). enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted. For Space. click Training Files. For Upper Limit. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . walls. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. select New. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Placing Spaces | 49 . For Offset. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and ceilings). indicating that it’s the active view. select Level 2 Plenum. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

9 Select the space. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. enter Library. for Number. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 219. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. For Name. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 14 In the drawing area.7 Click to place the space. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. ensuring coordination between the files.

change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. select Level 3. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Placing Spaces | 51 . Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. enter 0. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Offset. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Upper Limit. and then click Modify. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 21 Using the method learned previously.

25 Close the file with or without saving it. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 23 Click OK.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then split the space using a space separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.

and then press Esc. 5 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. for Upper Limit. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . select Level 3. enter 0. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Offset.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.rvt. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.

and scroll to the newly placed space. and select Corridor. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Click in the number column. In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 9 In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . which was numbered 219Q. click in the name column. and change the space number to 216A.

14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 15 Press Esc twice. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 11 Close the schedule view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. as shown.

56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 18 Close the file with or without saving it.16 Using the method learned previously. you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.

Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If necessary. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.rvt. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand Spaces. 10 In the plan view. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 6 Enter VG. select Level 3. 12 Click in the section view. right-click. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. select the space. select Roof Level. click in the chase area to place the space. for Upper Limit. and then click OK. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. In the plan view. select Interior and Reference. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. On the Options Bar. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. For Offset.4 Press Esc. for Upper Limit. enter 0. and click Element Properties.

enter Chase.■ For Limit Offset. ceilings. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. and click OK. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.Space Plan. for Name. under Loaded Tags. 15 Press Esc. floors. For Number. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 17 Type ZF. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . ■ ■ 14 Click OK. and maximize the view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . Under Identity Data. Bounding elements (such as walls. enter 1200. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter 225PC. All spaces in the view are tagged. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. To display space reference lines. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. under Spaces.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. indicating that it’s the active view. After a space is placed in an area. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Reference. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. In the next exercises. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. which removes the space from the Default zone. In this exercise.

To display space reference lines. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . and verify the zones in the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. double-click 121 Cafeteria. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and a new zone is created. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The Zone tool is active. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The graphic in the System Browser updates. click Reference. the Edit Zone tab displays.Zoning is highlighted. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. you assign spaces to a zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Next. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Energy Analysis. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). select Occupiable.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. ) or 5 In the System Browser. under Spaces. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. As you do this.

Expand HVAC Zones. Click OK. select HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). To view the zone in the drawing area. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Using the Edit Zone tab. and modify the zone properties. Instruction. you need to activate the zone visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and Electrical 220 spaces. type VG. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. select Computer Lab 222. and click Finish Editing Zone. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. 5 With the drawing area active. Instruction 221. 4 In the drawing area. In the System Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

West . enter 2 . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Zoning. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Click in the Level 1 . 11 Close the System Browser.Zoning view to activate it. and click OK. for Name.West .rvt.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. click Reference. click Finish Editing Zone.TIP After you finish editing the zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. under Spaces. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. under Identity Data. indicating that it’s the active view. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. and verify the zone in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 9 In the System Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. expand 2 . you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. To display space reference lines. You activated zone visibility in the views.Area B. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. zoom out. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. click in the Level 2 . Verify that the distance is 12mm. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 8 In the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning floor plan. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. Select Attached End.Zoning view. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 15 Press Esc.

The new zone name displays in the System Browser. space. and zone information. verify that Wireframe is selected. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Front. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. click the corner where the Top. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. enter Lounge . you verify the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and click OK. for Name Value. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.rvt.East. and select 109 Lounge. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. double-click the zone tag. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. on the ViewCube.Zoning view.Zoning to make it the active view.

Using the Highlight tool.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. Next. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ ■ On the Details tab. With 109 Lounge selected. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Click (Highlight). click (Isolate). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. you isolate the space. select 1_South_Area C. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them.

Next. and then click OK. and in the People dialog. cooling air temperature. For People. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that <Building> is selected. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that <Building> is selected. For Heating Information. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Below the list of spaces and zones. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. the space information displays for the selected space. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and dehumidification set point. This indicates the heating set point. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.22 °C : N/A is specified. click . and humidification set point.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. and then click OK. For Electrical Loads. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. verify that 23. This indicates the cooling set point. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. click (Shading). and air changes per hour. verify that 21.11 °C : 32. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. Next. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. outdoor air per area. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. click . ■ ■ ■ Next. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. click . Below the list of spaces and zones. For Cooling Information. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. heating air temperature. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. This indicates the outdoor air per person. select 109 Lounge. select Lounge/Recreation.33 °C : 12. scroll down in the left pane. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type.22 °C : N/A is specified. the zone information displays for the selected zone. For Construction Type. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . and click OK.

17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. and other room-bounding components. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Cancel. For Offset.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. floors. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter 0. roofs. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 15 In the Project Browser. open MEP . select Level 3.

Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Because this is an unoccupied space. and select space Plenum 212P. space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. select Plenum. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Energy Analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Click OK. In this exercise. for Number. For Name. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. enter 212P. and zone information. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). and verify that the space has replaced the void. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Under Energy Analysis. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. you verified building. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.

On the Place tab. verify that Level 1 is selected. under Volume Computations. this option adjusts the times automatically. On the Weather tab. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Click OK twice. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. and click OK. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For Export Complexity. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate.Space Plan. right-click. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Sliver Space Tolerance. for Energy Data.rvt. 8 In the drawing area. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click Level 2 . When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. click in the Value field. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. For Location. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Project Phase. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . and click Element Properties. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. select space Library 219. enter 03101. In order to select a space. select School or University. under Energy Analysis. NH. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. for Building Service. for City. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. verify that New Construction is selected. is selected. you need to select this option. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Building Construction. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For Postal Code. verify that Manchester. If. and click OK. For Ground Plane. click Training Files. verify that <Building> is specified. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that 300 is specified. click Edit.

verify that Manchester. click in the Value column. Select Area per person. click Edit. enter 60 W.Audio Visual. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. for Values. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. For People. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Next. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Library . For Condition Type. For Location. m. a cooling load. is specified. or neither. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Heated and cooled. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. 12 Click the Details tab. You have verified the building information. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Latent. Click OK. For Space Type. Click OK twice. for Values. for Values. and click to learn the cause for the warning. For Sensible. and click OK. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Specified. click Edit. select Actual. For Building Construction. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. enter 45 W. Select the space associated with the warning. select Specified. verify that Occupiable is selected. and enter 15 sq. verify that School or University is selected. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. for Values. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . verify that <Building> is specified. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). both. For Building Service. Under Power. Under Heat Gain (per Person). select Actual. and then click . NH.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. it should be corrected before you calculate loads.

TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. 15 Review the loads report for project. 16 After you review the loads report. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 17 In the loads report. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. space. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. and can be modified here. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 22 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and zone information for the building model. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. click Information). select 219 Library. or make any changes to the model. under Energy Analysis. weather. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. verify that Heating Set Point is 21.11°C. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. select 219 Library. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and under Heating Information. There should be no warnings displayed. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 19 In the drawing area. You should correct the space error in the building model. or zone information. 21 Click OK. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. space. click Calculate. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and a loads report displays. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 .Space Plan.

For Color Scheme. 5 Zoom in to the legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select HVAC Zones.rvt. click to the right of the building to place the legend.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Click OK. in relatively small increments. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the drawing area. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range.

select the color scheme legend.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view.Expanded Ranges. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. select Cooling Load . 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . under Schemes. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

11 Using the method learned previously. In the next exercise. click Training Files.rvt. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In this exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise.

For Type. Select Schedule building components. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. In the Fields dialog.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Under Available fields. and then click . select Spaces. For Formula. more category options are available.Space Fill is the active view. enter Space Airflow Schedule. select Spaces. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. For Discipline. select Calculated Supply Airflow. For Phase. ■ Click Calculated Value. select HVAC. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Formula. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter . Click OK. and click OK. select Air Flow. Click OK. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Name. for Select available fields from. select New Construction.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click (Browse). Select Formula. enter Airflow Delta. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

Under Conditions to Use. select Level. For Then by. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. right-click to access schedule properties. click the color swatch. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. Click OK twice. and then click Conditional Format. select Number. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. select red. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. Header. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and click OK. a view opens that contains the selected space. ■ The schedule displays. Select Ascending. select Not Between. select Airflow Delta.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Value. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. select Level. verify that Show is highlighted. For Background Color. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and then select Hidden field. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. and Blank line. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Fields. In the Color dialog.

Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. In the next lesson. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. In later exercises.

you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. 79 . you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After completing the air systems lesson. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you modify air terminal parameters. As you place the air terminals. After system creation. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Then. In this lesson. you will create supply air systems.

click Training Files. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and scroll to space 223. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 3 In the ceiling view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the space crossing lines display.

click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and press Enter. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and then select both Copy and Multiple. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and press Enter. Also. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. The schedule updates with the new flow data. and then press Esc to end the command. the hosted elements are updated as well. type 3600. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. If the host element is modified or moved. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 9 On the Placement panel. which in this case is the ceiling grid. enter 215 L/s. select the diffuser. verify that Constrain is cleared. 15 On the Options Bar. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor down. 13 On the Options Bar. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and select M_Supply Diffuser .8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. click Place on Face. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. for Flow. as shown.

notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Next. 21 On the Options Bar. select one of the diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 28 On the Placement tab. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 22 In the drawing area. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . 25 In the drawing area. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown.rfa. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. 24 In the Open dialog. click Place on Face. As you place the return diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and click Open.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. clear Leader. and then press Esc.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 29 Place 2 diffusers. click Yes.

34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. for Reference. select one of the return diffusers. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click to select the lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. under Other. and click OK. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select Strong Reference. Level. click Yes. as shown. 31 In the alert dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 32 In the Project Browser.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area.

36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. align the other return diffuser. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. and then press Esc twice. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 40 In the drawing area. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 43 Using the same method. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. select the vertical grid line as shown. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown.

48 Close the file with or without saving it. and on the Options Bar. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. As you place the air terminals. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. select both return diffusers. enter 310 L/s. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 47 Using the same method. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . clear LeftArrow. and click OK. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. and press Enter. and click Element Properties. right-click.44 While pressing Ctrl. for Flow. under Mechanical. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left.

HVAC Plan . 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the space crossing lines display. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. click 1 : 100. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design to make it the active view. 9 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 On the View Control Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1 .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . at the lower left corner of the building.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.200 Neck.rvt. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 In the drawing area. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. for Scale. select M_Supply Diffuser . click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. 8 In the Type Selector. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. expand HVAC .

14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. Click OK. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. By copying the diffuser. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Press Esc. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow.Airflow. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. enter 170 L/s. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. 11 Select the diffuser. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. enter 2400. As a result. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . type 6000. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. Under Mechanical . for Offset. and then press Enter. move the cursor down.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. under Constraints. Also.

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers.16 Using the same method. clear Leader. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then press Esc. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 18 On the Options Bar.

Next. mark. it is a negative value. For Category. Type. for Flow. double-click System Type. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. under Other. for Embedded Schedule. select 21. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. and Flow. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. select Air Terminals. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 Using the method learned previously. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. Mark. enter 210 L/s. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. under Available Fields. and click View Properties. 27 In the schedule. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). for Sort by. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under space 115. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Mark. type. 25 Click OK 3 times. tile the windows. and then right-click in the schedule. and press Enter. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. click Edit. 29 Using the same method.

HVAC Plan . 31 In the drawing area. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. As you highlight the zone. and maximize Level 1 .Design. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. as shown. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.

zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 36 In the drawing area.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog.3 times the heating load). 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. and under Energy Analysis.7-18 kW . 35 In the Type Selector. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.43 W (approximately 1. select M_WSHP .Horizontal .High Efficiency .

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. You then create the logical connection between the system components. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 6 Keep the System Browser open. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. including energy analysis. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display. and click OK. In this exercise. As you add diffusers to systems. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. When you highlight a space. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. click Training Files. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc.rvt. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . enter . 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Systems. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. After creating the logical connection. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. However. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. right-click the title. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. for Constraints ➤ Offset. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.

10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 12 In the System Browser. 17 Using the method learned previously. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. review the Number of Elements. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and Flow value. the number of elements is updated. System Name. and the system connects them. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Connect Into. 11 In the drawing area. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click OK. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. On the Options Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). the air terminals are the children. 15 Click Cancel. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system.

highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click Finish Editing System. under Identity Data. which updates the name in the System Browser. In this exercise.rvt. for Mark. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. In this exercise. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. for System Name. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 25 Click OK.Rename the system Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. under Mechanical.

indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select the upper left diffuser. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Duct Type. enter 3000. which provides various layout tools. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Settings. For Duct Type. Also. the Network type provides several solutions. 4 In the drawing area. enter 3000. 7 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Select Branch. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display.Design is highlighted. For Offset. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . In this case.Round. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Network. For Flex Duct Type. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and display solution 1. A Generate Layout tab displays. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. For Offset. 5 On the Options Bar.

If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the duct. click Modify. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 11 Click Finish Layout. For example. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. you’ll get an error in a later step. select a different layout solution. enter 900. Click OK.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. as is the elbow itself. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.

This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. for Color Scheme. and click to select it. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and equipment. select Duct Color Fill . highlight a segment of the main duct. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. a disconnection exists. fittings.Flow. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. If the entire network does not highlight. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Using a flow-based color scheme. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. The first time you press Tab. Usually. and click OK. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. thus it is not part of the system. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.

and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. but not all values are used in this view. for Flow. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. under Graphics. for Values Displayed. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 In the drawing area. and then click OK. select By View. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select one of the diffusers in the system. and press Enter.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. under Mechanical . Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select the WSHP. and on the Options Bar.Airflow.

and select 400. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select Calculated Size Only. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select Only. and then click to select it. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.65 Pa/m. select Duct Color Fill . 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select the color scheme legend. highlight a segment of the duct. and enter . and drag it to the right. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. for Schemes. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select Restrict Height. 26 Click OK. for Branch Sizing. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Under Constraints. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.Velocity. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Select the upper segment of main duct. click Cancel. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. select Friction. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP).

33 Move the cursor over the system components. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .The ductwork and fittings are updated. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and pressure loss. pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. Using this tool. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. static pressure.

remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. 35 Click Finish. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. click Training Files. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. In the left pane of the Open dialog. also known as the critical path. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.

and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. and click to specify the end of the main duct. and select the WSHP.HVAC Plan . and click Draw Duct. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.

The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. and click Draw Duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the corner where the Top. 14 In the Project Browser. right-click the connector grip. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Front.3D MEP.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. NOTE When drawing duct.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 15 On the ViewCube. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. select the top right diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. double-click MEP . enter 3000. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.

in space 115. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. it is considered a closed loop.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 19 In the drawing area. The ductwork is automatically created.

25 Press Esc. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 .22 Using the same method.

32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 30 Press Esc twice. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and then click Modify. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

and click OK. and click to select it. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 40 Using the same method. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. under Constraints. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.Airflow. select a segment of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. clear Restrict Height. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . such as a plenum. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. under Mechanical . and then click OK.

108 .

Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you place mechanical equipment. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. on level 3 of the building model.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Then. and a cooling tower located on the roof. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Automatically and manually lay out piping. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. 109 . In this lesson. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. including 2 base mounted pumps. Create return and supply piping systems.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .7-18kW . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Design is highlighted. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Horizontal High Efficiency . as shown. click Training Files.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . in corridor 328. and select M_WSHP . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Left Return .

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 8 Click the corridor wall face. and click to place the dimension. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. verify that Wall faces is selected. click the dimension. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 7 On the Options Bar. click the top edge of the WSHP. 10 Select the WSHP. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. and enter 600.

verify that the WSHP is still selected.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select the 2 WSHPs. and in the Type Selector. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.) 14 Click Modify. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl.

as shown. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. for Water Flow. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . and click to place it in the mechanical room. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Under Mechanical. 21 Click Modify. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.75 L/s. enter 2750. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 0. for Offset.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. you create the return and supply piping systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). Create pipes to physically connect the system components. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.22 Close the file with or without saving it. but without a corresponding system. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create the logical connection between the system components. You can create pipes to connect system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. including flow and pressure. analyses cannot be performed.

Design is highlighted. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder.Mech 330). select the 2 WSHPs. As you assign equipment to systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Creating a Piping System | 115 . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. click Training Files. right-click the Systems column heading.rvt. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Therefore.HVAC Plan . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. where it is easier to review the information. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Assigning a system component to an existing system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. while pressing Ctrl. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 5 In the System Browser. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and click View ➤ Piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. This display indicates that the system is selected. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .

select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 17 On the Options Bar. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. for System Name. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. Notice that on the Options Bar. 13 Click Finish Editing System.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You have created the hydronic return system. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. and the Edit System tool is not active. select the boiler. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.

22 In the Select Connector dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. In heating mode. under Design ➤ HVAC . You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and select the cooling tower. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. and click OK. In cooling mode.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 25 Select the boiler. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).Design ➤ Floor Plans. and bypasses the cooling tower. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 23 Close the roof plan view.HVAC Plan . 26 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.Design. double-click Roof . Creating a Piping System | 117 . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.

You also manually modify the layout path as required. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 32 In the System Browser.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. expand Piping. and click OK. and click Select. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 31 In the Column Settings dialog. In the System Browser. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Expand All. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower.8. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. for Water Flow. enter 0. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 28 Using the same method. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click Column Settings. including the flow rate and size of the component. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. you can view several parameters. and click OK. 29 Right-click CHWS. indicating the logical connection. and click Properties. under Mechanical. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise.

Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).Mech 330). press Tab to highlight the system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. When you draw a box to select components. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. click Check None. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. select Mechanical Equipment.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and click to select it. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). you can place the cursor over a system component. 5 In the Filter dialog.HVAC Plan . 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design is highlighted. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. and click OK. A system preview displays in red. click Training Files. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . indicating that it’s the active view. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the boiler.rvt. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. then the Select a System dialog displays. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.

select Perimeter. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. click Settings. 10 Click OK. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. It does not reference the architecture. For Inset. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Click Cancel. 11 On the Options Bar. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. or architectural components. verify that Solutions is selected.9 In the Select a System dialog. select CHWR. structural beams. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 450. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. duct. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type.

16 Click Finish Layout. to display the path with thinner lines. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 17 Optionally. and press Tab 3 times.75 L/s. 19 In the drawing area. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . the flow for each WSHP is 0. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. With each Tab.

The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.50 L/s. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.75 L/s).50 L/s. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical. and click OK. 23 Under Mechanical. and click OK. and access its instance properties.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. 22 Select the boiler. 24 Press Esc.

29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the Number of Elements is now 8. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. click Edit System. 28 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . double-click Level 1 .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 32 Click Finish Editing System. 27 On the System Tools panel. Logically. On the Options Bar. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .Design.

you physically close the CHWR loop.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. and click Cancel.44 L/s. note that the value for Flow is 4. 35 Using the drag control. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. which propagates flow throughout the system.94 L/s. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 38 Using the same method. Next. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. under Mechanical. as shown. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.50 L/s.94 L/s. so the total flow of 6. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. access its instance properties.

enter 450. select CHWS. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and then click OK. For Inset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . select Perimeter 1 of 5. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. For Slope. select a WSHP. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter 0. 40 In the Select a System dialog.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. 41 Click OK. Click Settings. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial.00%. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.

45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. In a later exercise. as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 47 In the drawing area. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 46 Click Modify. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 48 While pressing Ctrl.

select a different layout solution. as shown. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 51 Click Finish Layout. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 50 Using the same method. or manually modify the pipe. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. To create the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Either relocate the system components.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . As you work in the training file.rvt. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. click Training Files.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown.Design is highlighted. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 3D Building. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.HVAC Plan . NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. and the return pipes are magenta.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . select the section of piping. as shown. 6 Press Delete.

8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Click to specify the reference point. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. select the boiler. ■ Click to move the piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

The connections are automatically created. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click OK. and the lower one is secondary. 13 In the plan view.11 In the Select Connector dialog. 12 In the 3D view. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. select the return pipe riser. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and click Draw Pipe. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. select the boiler. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.

if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 381. for Offset.In a plan view. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. enter 600. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and you select 1 connector. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.

and click OK. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. As you place piping runs that are close together. select the primary base mounted pump. 18 Press Esc twice. and the appropriate fittings are created. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 19 In the plan view. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. right-click the bottom connector. and select it. and click Draw Pipe. and click the minus symbol. as shown. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. you select the tee fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to draw the pipe.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays.

and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . for Offset.28 Press Esc. enter 1200. right-click the discharge connector. select the primary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.

these pipe connections were created automatically. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc.

35 Using the method learned previously. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. as shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . enter 2850. and press Enter. type 300. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify.

select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. notice that Flow is 6. and click Element Properties.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. which is rounded up to 3.50 or 50% of the Flow. Connect the cooling tower Next. right-click. 43 Press Esc. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . and click Element Properties. When you create the pumps in parallel.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. view the properties for the secondary pump. 42 Click OK. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. for Cooling Water Flow. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . the value is 0 L/s. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow.44 L/s. and click OK. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. 40 Click Cancel.44 L/s). The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. select the cooling tower. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 44 In the 3D view. under Mechanical. The flow is being propagated through the piping. notice that under Mechanical. 46 Press Esc. 48 In the plan view. under Mechanical. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. as shown. In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Using the same method.

■ Lower pipe (outlet).■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

44 L/s.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . and close the dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 50 In the 3D View. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. select the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc.

When the valve is open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan .52 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and is heated by the boiler. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Valves In this exercise. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. the water bypasses the cooling tower.

7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.4 On the Options Bar. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. The bypass valve is closed by default. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Adding Valves | 145 . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Press Esc twice. and select M_Ball Valve .

12 Select M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method. parallel to the previously placed valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.10 Press Esc. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . place another M_Ball Valve .

Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Using the same method. under Mechanical. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 147 . right-click.44 L/s. and click Element Properties. and click OK. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 6. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.

Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (This valve allows the water to flow through it. validate that the Flow is 6.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. click Training Files. 22 Using the method you just learned.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.44 L/s. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. and select M_Ball Valve . You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Initially. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).44 L/s. In heating mode. and select M_Ball Valve . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.rvt. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. 20 Select the bypass valve. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.

Design is highlighted. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC Plan . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click Pipe Color Fill .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click OK. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. indicating that it’s the active view.Flow.Size. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Pipe Color Fill . for Schemes. as shown. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Under Constraints. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). and enter 220 Pa/m. Click OK. or offset elevations are incorrect. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. or manually modify the pipe. Select And.5 m/s. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Either relocate the system components. enter 1. and for Velocity. and click to select the branch. 13 Press Esc. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select Friction. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. for Branch Sizing. select a different layout solution. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.

4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.rvt. Using the System Inspector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. pressure. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.Design ➤ 3D Views. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and double-click 3D Building. Inspecting the System | 151 . and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Inspecting the System In this exercise.

NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as required. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. An inspection flag reports the section number. This information helps you modify the system design. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. flow. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. and pressure information including pressure loss.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Warnings display. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 9 Using the same method.HVAC Plan .1 Pa. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and to size pipe.7. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. select 32° C. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. inspect Section 6 again.4 Pa. and double-click Level 3 .3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. for Fluid Temperature. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.Note that the Flow is 1. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.Design. you need to validate them. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. the Static Pressure is 41916.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.rvt. targeting those systems that need attention. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .0 L/s. and click OK. 10 Click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. 4 In the System Browser. and confirm unassigned system components. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 10 Using the same methods. right-click the Systems titlebar. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. After you assign components to a system. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and click Expand All. 9 Right-click CHWS.HVAC Plan . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). For example. As you learned when placing components. and select Level 3 .HVAC Plan . 12 In the System Browser. TIP If you have multiple views open. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. If you place components without assigning them to a system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. In the System Browser. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and for pipe sizing. and click View.Design floor plan. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.Design. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. right-click Hydronic Return. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. After you have assigned all components to systems. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . thus assigning the components to a system. click Close. otherwise. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. double-click Level 1 . Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and click Show to view all of the system components. the pipe is associated with that system. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 7 In the System Browser.

Checking Piping Systems | 155 . and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned.13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.

156 .

157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Define required lighting. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

click Training Files. select 90. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Select Correction Factor.04. select Copper. expand Wiring . select Copper. wiring.Wire Sizes. enter 70. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. For Factor. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. enter THHN. In this exercise you review electrical settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ For Material. click (Open). 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ Click New Correction Factor. distribution systems. select Wiring Types. Click OK. and demand factors that are applied in the design. You also add a wiring type. speeding up the design phase. As you place components and create circuits. For Material. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Temperature. enter 1.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems.

select THHN. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select Distribution Systems. select Steel. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. Select Neutral Required. For Max Size. enter 1. Click Split. enter 250. For Maximum. select 120. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. enter 2000. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For L-G Voltage.0. For Wires. enter 240. For Neutral Size. select 240. For Conduit Type. select Single. select 3. enter 240. By specifying a range. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. select Hot Conductor Size. Click OK. select 10000 VA. For Value. enter 220. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. select Demand Factors. For L-L Voltage. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select 75. For Insulation. enter 120/240. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For Minimum. For Neutral Multiplier. select Power. For Phase. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . Under More Than. select Voltage Definitions. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 50.

click Add. Click OK twice. For Group Parameter Under. In this case the key style is the type of space and. select Electrical. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise.rvt. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Spaces. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Under Categories. click Training Files. 5 In the drawing area. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. such as offices. and conference rooms. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. restrooms. For Type of Parameter. For Discipline.Lighting. select Illuminance. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under the Electrical . select Electrical . Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. enter Required Lighting Level.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. and double-click Level 2 . click (Open). Verify that Instance is selected. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Lighting group in the space element properties. Later in the tutorial. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces.Lighting Plan.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. and click OK. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Click OK. and for Key Name. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . select Spaces. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. For Name. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. under Electrical . double-click Required Lighting Level. enter Open Office.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. enter 485. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Lighting Levels.Lighting. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available Fields. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows.

Lighting Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . change the sort order back to the default setting.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that as you enter the data. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. select Required Lighting Level. for Sorting/Grouping. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. Select Blank Line. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 22 Using the same method. click Edit. 21 Click OK twice. which is mapped to project units. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .

The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. In this exercise. 27 Click OK. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. the value input applies only to the selected space. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. for Lighting Levels. that Required Lighting Level is blank. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Later in this exercise. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. click (Open). Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. select Instruction-Standard. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition.rvt. and click (Add Value). click (Add Value) again. 00 lx still selected. For example. enter Required Lighting and click OK. click (Duplicate). and press ENTER. enter 200. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. verify the By Range is selected. for Title. and press ENTER. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. Select the scheme for 500 lx.00 lx.00 lx. enter 800. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Spaces. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. ■ Click OK. and in the At Least column. Under Schemes. For Color. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after.00 lx. for Name. enter 900. Select the scheme for 450.00. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. enter Required Lighting Levels.00. for Category. and press Enter. Select the scheme for At Least 20.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. select Required Lighting Level. click Training Files. then the new value will be 400 lx. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. and click (Add Value) five times. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add.

Level. select Electrical. For Type. Average Estimated Illumination. double-click Number. Click OK. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 13 Click Calculated Value. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .Lighting CF. for Available Fields. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Lighting Delta. For Color Scheme. select Required Lighting. and double-click Level 2 . select Illuminance. For Name. 8 In the drawing area. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Discipline. Name. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and Required Lighting Level. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. select Spaces. select Spaces.

Click OK twice. under Condition. Select Blank Line. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Click Background Color. select Average Estimated Illumination. select Required Lighting Level. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination.■ For Formula. for Fields. for Sort by. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header. press the spacebar. and click Browse. select Not Between. Click Conditional Format. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. for Custom Colors. click Browse. For Value. Click OK three times. select Level. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Formula. Click OK. type a hyphen. On the Formatting tab. select Red. for Test. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. select Lighting Delta.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create a panel schedule. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. 171 . Then. as you place lighting fixtures. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. First. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. power circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create power loads. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.

click Training Files. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.Lighting Ceiling plan. 8 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . Under Scheme Definition. for Basic Colors. select the color legend.rvt. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select the color for Less Than 200 lx. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. click (Open). expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.Lighting CF view is open. By using orange as the color for this range. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select Average Estimated Illumination. select Orange. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. In the Color dialog. for the Spaces Category. Click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. You can create additional color schemes. 2 In the drawing area.

with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. which is the lowest value in the specified range.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). zoom to space Library 219. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. 13 Click the Level 2 .

the +/. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. the fixtures will move accordingly.277V. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.5 fc range.5 fc range is satisfied. 18 Click to place the fixture. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Select the lighting fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. enter 162. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ Under Electrical Loads.00 VA. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. scroll to view space space Library 219. In the Name dialog. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Apparent Load. for Name enter and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 9 In space Library 219. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. select the top center fixture. Junction Boxes. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ Under Photometrics.00 lm. ■ Click OK twice. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Click OK.93. select Luminous Flux. click Training Files. you add switches. Under Photometrics. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Under Photometrics. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. enter . enter F15. and click OK. Under Photometrics. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. In the Select File dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click (Open). select 463T5_S. junction boxes. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m.rvt. for Type Mark. click the value for Initial Color. click the value for Light Loss Factor. and receptacles to your design. specify 15000. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog.85. for Ballast Loss Factor.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.ies and click Open. Junction Boxes. click the value for Initial Intensity. select Xenon and click OK. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select T5 [HO]. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Placing Switches. Placing Switches. for Color Preset. In the next exercise. and Receptacles | 183 . ■ Click Apply. for Lamp. enter . and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Under Electrical. 2 In the drawing area. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

The element type M_Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open.NoLoad. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 185 .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Select M_Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Junction Boxes.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. enter JB-1NL. Click Edit Type. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . In the Type Properties dialog. for Mark. enter 2750. 15 Select the junction box. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . NOTE When entering values. zoom to space Library 219. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Electrical. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 21 In the drawing area.Offset. Click OK twice. for Level 2 . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. note the Number of Poles is 1. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.14 Press ESC to end the command.

and Receptacles | 187 . Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. NOTE If necessary. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 23 In the System Browser. 26 In the System Browser. and Number of Elements. Expand General. 24 For any column. and Voltage. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Distribution System.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Space Name. Space Number. Click OK. Junction Boxes. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Placing Switches. right-click and click Column Settings. Expand Electrical. Select Load. Select Size.

30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser.

40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. select Copy and Multiple. move the cursor along the wall. 38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 189 . Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and enter 3650 and press ENTER.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .42 Move the cursor down. 43 Press ESC to end the command.

Junction Boxes. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Placing Switches.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. and Receptacles | 191 . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.equipment. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Adding wiring to a project is optional. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.rvt. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).Surface: 100A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).208V MCB . click (Open). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . click Training Files. and work toward the higher voltage. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

for Distribution System. 15 On the Options Bar. enter PP-2B.Loads. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. #1 Pole Breakers. select 480/277 Wye.480V MCB .5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 9 On the Options Bar. 14 Select the panelboard. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Max.Loads. Click OK. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Click OK. enter LP-2B. 8 Select the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter 20. select 120/208 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. for Max. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . For Panel Name. 7 Press ESC to end the command. For Panel Name.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. for Distribution System. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 20.

zoom to space Instruction 221. and for Category.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . which is the logical connection between the elements. 23 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 20 In the drawing area. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 28 Press ESC to end the command.

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Press ESC.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 38 Press ESC to end the command. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.35 Select the left three-way switch.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. click Check None. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .rvt. click (Open).39 Using the same method. and for Category. Click OK. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and create permanent wiring. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 2 In the drawing area. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 42 In the Filter dialog. Click OK.Loads. enter 2. select Wires. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Hot Conductors. except without wire. click Training Files. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Next you create circuits without showing wire.

6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. expand Power. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Distribution System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 13 In the System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. right-click on the Systems heading. Click OK. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Rating. and verify that Load. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and then expand circuit 1. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Voltage. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Expand Electrical. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and Voltage Drop are selected.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.

Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 30 Close the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Click Tags. Click OK.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 22 With the junction box still selected. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Click OK. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. under Identity Data. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. Click Yes. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. select Break. click below the first one to place it. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 47 In the drawing area. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. For Circuit Number. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. enter FR4. 40 Click OK twice. click Edit Type. for Type Mark. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated.

Click Save. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. click Check None. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. for File Name. and click Apply. Click OK. click (Open). 54 Select all of the tags. click Training Files. Next you create a switch system. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. and for Category.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rfa. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. enter a comma. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 52 In the Save As dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 57 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click OK.

14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. Creating a Switch System | 205 . Click OK. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. for Switch ID.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. under Electrical Lighting. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. enter a. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.

25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.Lighting. Click OK. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. under Electrical .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. for switch ID. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter b. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Next you create a circuit and size wire. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 4 In the Filter dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. click Check None. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. lighting. enter 2. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open).26 Close the file with or without saving it. and data systems. select Electrical Fixtures.rvt. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Click OK. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. 7 In space Electrical 220. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. under Electrical . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space.Loads. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Circuits are used for power. and click Element Properties. for Hot Conductors. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. select the PP-2B panel.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and in the right pane. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and click Open.13 Select the wire again. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Wiring. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 19 Click OK. and click to select the circuit. and in the drawing area. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.

as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 28 In the drawing area. 22 In space Electrical 220. 29 In space Instruction 221. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. in space Instruction 221. 26 Press Delete.

An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Next you balance the loads for your design. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.

Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Scroll down. 6 Click OK. select panel LP-2B. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 .Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Click OK. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open.rvt. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. the distribution is shifted. 1-#12. click Open. Finally. zoom to space Electrical 220. enter 30A. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 1-#10. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Rebalance Loads. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 3 In the Electrical space. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Under Electrical-Loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Had there been a greater imbalance. for Rating. 1-#10. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 1-#12. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. click Training Files. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 2 In the drawing area. After re-balancing loads. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same.

and click OK. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. enter 25A. under Electrical . 15 Select panel PP-2B. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. select the transformer TP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 24 Click Select Panel. enter 40A. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. for Rating. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 17 Close the warning dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads. and click OK. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 14 Close the warning dialog. Next you create a panel schedule. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 12 Select panel PP-2B.Loads. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. under Electrical .

The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. select Bold and Italic. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. expand Sheets (all).Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. enter 4 mm. for Font Size. Under Header Text. Click OK. and open E601 . Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. click (Open). Next you use the System Browser to check your design. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. for Font Size. under Other. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Under Header Text. click Training Files. 10 Click OK twice. select Berlin Sans FB. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Appearance. for Font. click Edit. The Panel Schedule Report displays. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. enter 5 mm.Panel Schedules. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 4 Close the report. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Under Body Text. Select PP-2B. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet.

In the System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall.rvt. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Expand Unassigned. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select space Lounge 212. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. press TAB once. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. each with a load of 180VA. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. click (Open). click Training Files.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 20 On the Options Bar. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 15 In the dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. zoom to space Electrical 214. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. Checking Your Design | 215 . for Panel. In the System Browser. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 17 In the drawing area. select MDP-1. under Warnings. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

click Training Files.Design is open. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. planning is critical to a successful design. type PVC .rvt. in addition to loading existing families.Vent. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In this exercise. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. and verify that Level 1 . you create a PVC pipe type. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click PVC . 219 . 4 In the Name dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. Adding a pipe size.Plumbing Plan .Sanitary. and click Properties. In this lesson. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.

select M_Tee Sanitary . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 25 For Outside. 21 In the right pane. Tap.Sch 40 . click Training Files. 10 On the Selection panel. enter 54. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 6 Click OK. click Pipe Settings.PVC .000 mm. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Branch. enter 10°. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.DWV: Standard. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. In the Project Browser.293 mm. For Offset.Vent is listed. select Sanitary.Sch 40 . select Sanitary. select Tee.DWV: Standard. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Mechanical.rfa.PVC . Tee. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for Nominal. enter 45. 26 Click OK. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .5 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 For the new pipe size. and open Metric\M_Trap P . 13 In the right panel. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and click OK. enter 46. click Modify. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.Sch 40 . and click Main. under Pipe Types. enter -1250. select None.006 mm. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.PVC . 18 For System Type.DWV. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Plastic. 22 Click New Size. 17 In the left pane. for Material. PVC . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 15 For System Type. 24 For Inside Diameter. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. Cross. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the cold water system. including plumbing fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. add a hot water heater. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. sanitary piping. 221 . Create the sanitary plumbing system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. vent.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

at the midpoint of the detail lines. as shown. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base is placed. a toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . A preview of the piping layout displays. for example. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. and click OK. select one of the components in the system. select Sanitary 107.

select PVC . click Solutions. and click OK. enter -350 mm. and click Settings. 29 On the Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.05%. enter -350 mm. select Main. 26 For Pipe Type. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 25 In the left pane. and for Offset. select 100 mm. select Branch. 24 For Offset.19 On the Options Bar. The default settings are automatically modified. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Intersections. 28 On the Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 27 For Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter -1225. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Slope. for Diameter. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements.Sanitary. 23 For Pipe Type. for Solution Type. 30 Click Modify. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work.Sanitary. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select PVC . 21 On Options Bar. enter 1. You accept this suggested solution.

32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.

as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 34 Click Modify. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view.33 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.36 Using the previous method. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . select the fitting and click to reorient it. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Overall. When a fitting is reversed.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

Plumbing Plan . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Public. select 560 mmx560 mm . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. in the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Element panel. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. under M_Lavatory . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 5 On the Placement panel. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Rectangular. click Training Files.

7 Click Modify. and press Enter to create a second sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. On the Options Bar. 8 Select the sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711. select Multiple.2.

12 In the drawing area. Press Esc. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. enter 711. and press Enter to create the third sink. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.2. click Add To System.

18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. as shown. 19 In the 3D view.Overall.16 On the Edit System panel. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 21 Select the tee. under Design ➤ Plumbing . In the System Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 20 Select the fitting. use the ViewCube to orient the view. click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ 3D Views.

05%. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 24 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe. for Offset. for Slope.22 In the plan view. 27 Click Modify. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 1. 26 On the Options Bar. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Apply. enter 760 mm. press Spacebar. with the tee fitting selected. and click Draw Pipe.

Sch 40 . 32 Select the double wye fitting.DWV. select Standard. click to place the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 29 In the Type Selector.PVC . 30 In the 3D view. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 31 Click Modify.

on the Options Bar. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. In the next steps. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. and press Enter. double-click the section head to open the section view. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. right-click the right connector. 36 In the section view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. for Offset. enter 305 mm. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected. enter 150 mm. 37 Select the fitting. 34 Press Esc. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 40 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. and click to place the pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . as shown.

draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and press Esc. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 49 Using the same method. press Spacebar. enter 150 mm. right-click the bottom connector. 46 In the section view. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 48 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

select Standard. select the P-Trap on the left. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 52 In the plan view. 54 Click Modify. 51 In the Type Selector. 55 In the 3D view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.Sch 40 . 53 Using the same method. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.PVC . under M_Trap P . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 56 Using the same method.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .

57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify. and press Enter. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. 58 Using the same method. connect the right sink to the double wye. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. In the plan view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click in the plan view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Move the cursor to the left. select the left P-Trap. enter 150 mm.

while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. under Pipe Types. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. and select a proposed solution. click Finish to select the recommended solution. as shown. while pressing Ctrl. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select PVC Sanitary.■ In the 3D view. On the Routing Solutions panel. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select the section of pipe you just drew. Press Esc.

248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . adjusting the sanitary stack.05% is selected. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. click Finish.rvt. for Slope. and verify the slope. click Training Files. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 62 On the Options Bar. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise.

Floor level line. right-click the top connector. click Modify. 7 On the Selection panel. 10 In the 3D view.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. select Standard. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 9 In the Type Selector.DWV. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 5 Select the tee. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Design.Overall.Sch 40 .Plumbing Plan . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 3 In the Section view. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click Draw Pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click to draw the pipe. as shown.Design. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.PVC . under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select the vertical stack. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . select the elbow fitting on the right.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

However. After finishing each exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. go to http://www. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.autodesk. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. In this lesson. click Training Files. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. If the tutorial training files are not present.rvt. 2 Right-click Standard. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In this tutorial. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You create a new pipe type. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 267 . A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.

select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. and enter Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. select Fire Protection Wet. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. For System Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and then click OK. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. for Material. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you modify the type properties of the pipe. In the next exercise. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Fire Protection Wet. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Carbon Steel. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. verify that 2800 is selected. under Mechanical. 9 Click OK. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Next. you create project parameters and work with schedules. or architectural components. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. However. select Main. For System Type. In the left pane. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. verify that 2800 is specified. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. For Pipe Type. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Rename. In this exercise. duct. structural beams.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). For Pipe Type. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing.

select the upper half of the building. under Fire Protection.Fire Protection Piping Plan . for Sprinkler Zone. Under Categories. and then click OK. for Name. For Group parameter under. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.Design is highlighted. 8 Using a crossing window. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 In the drawing area. the space crossing lines display. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Add.rvt. select space Instruction 221 as shown. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Element Properties. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select Fire Protection. 5 Click OK twice. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Spaces.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Zone 1. right-click. click Training Files. enter Sprinkler Zone. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .

click Training Files. select Zone 1. including a calculated value parameter.rvt. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 13 Using the same method. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then click OK. and then click OK. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Fire Protection. and then access instance properties. verify that only Spaces are selected. to which you add various parameters. 10 In the Filter dialog. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter Zone 2. for Sprinkler Zone. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Click OK. select mm. For Type of Parameter. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Unit symbol. 7 Click OK. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Spaces. The schedule displays. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. for Name.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Length. Click OK.Design is highlighted. click Add Parameter. 14 Select the new header. and on the ribbon. select Millimeters. enter Maximum Spacing. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Rounding. enter Protection Area Construction Type.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 9 On the Formatting tab. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. For Name. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. double-click on each column separator. For Key name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select 0 decimal places. 6 Using the same method. click the Formatting tab. Select Schedule keys. and click Field Format. Obstructed-Combustible. 10 In the Format dialog. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. For Units. select Maximum Spacing. enter Light. select Fire Protection. 11 Click OK twice. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

In the Maximum Coverage Area column. enter 4575. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Ordinary.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Click OK. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Spaces. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Extra. For Name. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. and press Enter. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter 40. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary.

select Area. For Discipline. For Formula. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Type. click .Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 20 On the Formatting tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 22 Click OK twice. and click Field Format. select Fixed. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Units. For Rounding. In the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Enter the formula operator / after Area. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. select Number. select Minimum Sprinklers. 19 Click the Formatting tab. under Available fields. Click OK. select Common. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. and click OK. select 0 decimal place.

Under Field formatting. for Sort by. click Edit. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. select Grand totals. select Level. under Other. select Level. and click View Properties. and then click Field Format. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Sprinkler Zone. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Number. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and then select Hidden field. For Then by (second instance). and select Totals only. Select Header and Blank line. For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Then by.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Hidden field. Select Header and Blank line. For Fields. for Sorting/Grouping. At the bottom of the dialog. ■ In the Format dialog.

select Sprinklers. for Fields. On the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. and select Totals only. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Level equals Level 2. select Count. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Under Field formatting.27 In the drawing area. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Embedded Schedule. select Calculate totals. click Edit. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Available fields. for Filter. System Name. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Embedded Schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and Count. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Grand totals. 30 Click OK twice. for Filter by. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. click Edit. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. double-click Type. under Other. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. delete the word Maximum. and click View Properties. right-click the schedule. For Category. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2.

45 For Protection Area Construction Type. Unobstructed. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select space 221 Instruction. As a result. select space 221 Instruction. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. 41 In the plan view. and access the instance properties. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project.Fire Protection Plan Design. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select Light. 43 Click Cancel. under Identity Data. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 48 In the floor plan. Unobstructed. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 46 With the space still selected. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK. select Ordinary. and click OK. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 44 In the schedule. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. but their values are not determined. double-click FP . 50 Access the instance properties. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. for Protection Area Construction Type. for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you can choose to save your work. As you place the sprinklers. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . After finishing each exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. go to http://www. By following the recommended workflow.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. However. methodology. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. and double-click Level 2 . At the end of this tutorial. As you create the system. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. If the tutorial training files are not present. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.rvt. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. click Training Files. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.autodesk. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will understand the process.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. 279 . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. After placing the initial sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.

11 In the drawing area. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 206. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Press Esc twice. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. verify that Constrain is cleared. as shown. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. while pressing Ctrl. and 207. Also. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. and click to place 3 sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. select the sprinklers that you placed. 9 In space Instruction 202. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.

Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 18 Type WT. 200B. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 16 Close the ceiling plan view.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 17 In the Project Browser. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. you place non-hosted sprinklers. open Design ➤ FP . you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then press Esc.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . as shown. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and 200C). Next. specify a vertical offset. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.

0. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. move the cursor to the right. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met.FP_Ceiling view. This number is determined in the schedule. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and click Element Properties. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. For Number. enter 11. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you adjust the offset. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. In this exercise. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . 30 Close the file with or without saving it. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Next. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. under Constraints. In the next exercise. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. enter 4100. After creating the logical connection. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.19 In the floor plan. Notice that the schedule updates. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. and with piping (physical connection). for Offset. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and press Enter. enter 2900 mm. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 29 Press Esc. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 25 Click OK.

1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. As you assign sprinklers to systems. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. click View ➤ Systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). However.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.rvt. and select Piping. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 5 Right-click the header. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

Next. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. press Tab. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. select an initial piping layout. In the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. indicating the logical connection. 11 With the system still selected. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and click Select. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . place the cursor over a sprinkler. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. and select the system.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout.

17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). providing system editing tools. click Solutions. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. In the left pane. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet is selected. 23 For Offset. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Place Base. as shown. 12 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . click Settings. for System Name. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Main is selected. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and number of elements in the system. select Branch. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 13 In the System Browser. For Pipe Type. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. The Generate Layout tools are activated. select 150 mm.0 is specified. When the layout is finished. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. verify that 2800. 15 In the drawing area. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 22 On the Options Bar. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. For Offset.The Edit Piping System panel displays. enter -3650. and a piping layout preview displays. 19 Click OK. system equipment. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter.

and green represents branch lines). Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. click Modify. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. On the Generate Layout panel. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. verify that Network is selected. and select solution 4. A (parallel movement control) displays.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Creating a Piping System | 287 . The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. In general.

All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. or that offset elevations are incorrect. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 32 If necessary. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 29 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the pipe. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. as shown. Either relocate the system components. select a different layout solution.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.33 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. and then you create piping to physically connect them. 3 If necessary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Next.rvt. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. the Connect Into tool.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 1 In the Project Browser. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and various manual pipe creation tools. and select the elbow fitting as shown. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. click Finish Editing System. click Add To System. or a system component to display system tools. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. you can select the pipe or duct. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. air terminals. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. radiators. and so on) are logically connected by a system. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 9 On the Edit System panel. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and pipe or duct is created. 5 In the drawing area. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 8 In the corridor. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. mechanical equipment.

23 View the result in the 3D view. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. verify that Solutions is selected. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 13 Click Finish Layout. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and then tile the views. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan. 14 Close the System Browser. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown.11 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. for Solution Type. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 12 On the Options Bar. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. verify that Network is selected.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 .

26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. for Offset. 29 Using the same method. and then press Esc. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 2800.24 In the Piping Plan. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. 25 Select the sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. right-click. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 27 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. 28 In the drawing area.

Design is highlighted. click Training Files. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. select 1 : 50. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.rvt. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Because the whole system highlights. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. for Scale. 31 In the plan view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. and click View Properties. 8 Right-click. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

Fire Protection Plan . and then right-click the top connector. 13 Select the elbow fitting. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Default View Template. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. 15 Press Spacebar. 14 Select the tee fitting. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe.Design. select MEP Section. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For View Classification.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 12 If necessary.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. select FP . and press Enter. right-click Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. and click Draw Pipe. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. Under Identity Data. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 19 Make Level 2 . drag the top section boundary line up. and then click Modify. select Design. 10 In the Project Browser. for Sub-Discipline. 22 In the drawing area. for View Name. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Move the cursor up. enter 2135.Design the active view. and click Apply Default View Template. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter FP Section_Stair.

27 On the Placement Tools panel. and then click Modify. for Diameter. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . and click Draw Pipe. verify that Automatically Connect is active. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. select . 26 On the Options Bar. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). 24 Select the cabinet. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .23 In the section view. zoom to the hose reel cabinet.

and then click Modify.29 Close the section view. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. as shown.50 mm is selected. 33 In the Type Selector. verify that M_Gate Valve . and click Open. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 .rfa. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 36 Close the file with or without saving it. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. click Training Files. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.Design ➤ 3D Views.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.

or width. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. width. and click OK. height. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 7 On the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . All selected piping is now 1" diameter. Changing the diameter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. width. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. for Diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. or height. select 25mm.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. 8 Click Modify. click Check None. 4 In the floor plan view. 6 In the Filter dialog.

select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). select the linked architectural file. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. and click Open. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. and after each segment highlights. click to place the tag.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. . By hiding the linked file. 12 If necessary. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 18 In the 3D view. NOTE Tags are view specific.rfa. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Clear Leader. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Press Esc. 17 On the View Control Bar. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

select 100mm. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 21 On the Options Bar. and when the section highlights. for Diameter. The main piping is selected and displays in red. press Tab. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 .19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler.

select 40mm. 24 In the drawing area. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. 26 Using the same method. and maximize the floor plan. The pipe diameter is modified. 25 On the Options Bar. as shown. for Diameter.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You added tags to pipes. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. For additional practice. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. In this tutorial.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. In this exercise. you created a wet fire protection system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.

304 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

3 In the Rename View dialog. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Properties. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. If the view included detail graphics. click Training Files.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. under Floor Plans. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and apply a view template. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. 307 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and view references. matchlines.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. dependent views.

and click Apply Default View Template. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 10 In the drawing area.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. views and put them on the sheet. create dependent views for areas B and C. click Training Files. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. as shown. and click OK.rvt. 4 Using the same method. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. more focused. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 7 Close the file without saving. and click Rename. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and click OK. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 9 Click OK. and then press Esc. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C.

select 11. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Click OK. select black. For Line Pattern. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. and then press Esc. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 13 Press Esc twice. click the current value. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select Double Dash . 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. In the Color dialog. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. For Line Weight. 19 In the drawing area. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. and click OK.

apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. on the Options Bar. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. for Target view. as shown. 25 Using the same method. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries.20 Select the upper view reference and. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method.

Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. click Training Files. right-click 3D Plumbing. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Plumbing Isometric . For Default View Template. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 27 Using the same method. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Domestic Water. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and zoom to each of the view references. and select the section box. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view.rvt. 4 In the Project Browser. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 2 Zoom in. and click Properties.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. for View Name. select Plumbing Isometric.

312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. right-click Plumbing Isometric .■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select 3. for View Classification. select Plumbing. 10 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. select Documentation. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. and click to select it. and click Apply Default View Template. and then click OK. For Pattern. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. The section crop lines no longer display. Click Apply. For Sub-Discipline. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. Click OK.Domestic Water. select Dash. 6 In the Project Browser.

and click to select it. press Tab 3 times. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. 13 Using the same method.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

and click to select it. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 15 Right-click.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe.

Isometric. and in the Type Selector. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and in the view properties. select 1. specify Plumbing . 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click on the Format value. 18 Label the fixtures as shown.5mm Arial. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .16 Press Esc. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. and for Default View Template. 19 Using methods learned previously. For Slope. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. On the View Control Bar.Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. verify that Common is selected.

and then place the callout view on a sheet. as shown. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. 22 Click OK twice. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. you use a plan view to create a callout view. click Training Files. and click to place the spot slope annotation. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. select To the nearest 10. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 26 Press Esc twice.■ In the Format dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Rounding. indicating that it’s the active view. When the view is associated with a sheet. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe.

Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. select 1 : 50. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. for Scale.

using the same method. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select the viewport. double-click M601 . ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. for Line Weight. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select 5.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Title on Sheet. for View Name. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template. Click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Creating Callout Views | 319 . right-click the callout view. 17 In the Project Browser. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Apply Default View Template. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.

28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. under Names. right-click the detail view. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Apply View Template. Creating Callout Views | 321 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 26 In the Rename View dialog.

322 .

Creating Annotations In this exercise. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and annotation to create a legend. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. 323 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. work with model-based components. symbols. click Training Files. duct tags. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. linetypes. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and select 1. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 With the text still selected.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Press Esc twice. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.

13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 15 On the Options Bar. verify that Leader is cleared. a return diffuser. Creating Annotations | 325 . and a segment of rectangular duct. select a supply diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown. and then click Right Straight. 16 In the drawing area. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a segment of round duct. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box.

If necessary. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.rfa. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. under Category. 20 In the Tags dialog. and click Open. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. click Load. 22 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the Load Family dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.17 Click Modify. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Ducts. clear Leader. 24 On the Options Bar. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click OK. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. as shown. 25 In the drawing area.

Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 32 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.26 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 31 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 327 . and Attached End. Leader.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. for Leader. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 36 Press Esc twice. 34 In the drawing area. as shown. select Free End.33 On the Options Bar. then click to the right to place the leader as shown.

41 Close the file with or without saving it.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. indicating that it’s the active view. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control.rvt. 40 Using the method learned previously. and lock lighting fixtures. and all elements of that type are affected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. lay out. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. select the last tag placed. That’s because you changed a type property. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Leader Arrowhead. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and click OK. 37 In the drawing area. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Creating Dimensions | 329 . 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. you use temporary dimensions to locate. not simply an instance property. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m.

On the Options Bar. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the dimension line. and then select the interior face of the wall. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 14 Using the same method. 12 Click EQ. 13 Press Esc. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.

17 Press Esc. and offset them from the wall. and notes. Creating a Legend | 331 . annotation symbols. Because the dimensions are locked. click the 3 interior locks on the line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.rvt.9). you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. click Training Files.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. linework. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. and press Enter. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 Using the same methods. enter 2430.

2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. Click OK.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 5 Click in the drawing area.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For Scale.200 Neck. For View. click below the title to place the diffuser. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter Diffuser Legend. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 1 : 50.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . and select 1. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . select Floor Plan. 10 Using the same method. ■ 9 In the drawing area.

5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 14 In the drawing area.11 Press Esc. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. Creating a Legend | 333 . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 1. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

and then press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. The selected detail lines are now thin. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 24 Select the component’s break line. 21 Press Esc. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.DROP and its text note. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 22 Zoom in to the copied component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 26 Press Esc. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.

36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 335 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. enter E.30 Select Spot Elevation .MECHANICAL LEGEND. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. and then click Modify. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 34 Using the method learned previously.

39 With the viewport still selected. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Title w Line .

you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and text. indicating that it’s the active view. A drafting view using detail components. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. click Training Files. A detail callout that references another view. detail groups. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. 337 .Detailing 15 In this lesson.113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.

you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards. and then modify and align the views.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Next. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and click to place it. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 In the drawing area. 8 Using the same method. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 7 Drag the Power Riser .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.113 East on the sheet. clear Leader. place Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar.

and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Deactivate View. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Activate View.9 Press Esc. and click OK. under Identity Data. 12 Select the Level 1 line. select the 113 North view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 13 Right-click. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. giving the appearance of a single view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. for Title on Sheet. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left.

19 Select the Level 1 line. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 22 Press Esc. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Activate View. and select Title w Line . you add wiring to the diagram. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click. select the 113 East elevation view. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. In the next exercise.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. as shown. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. right-click. 21 Using the drag control.

enter Electrical Power. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise.113 North view. As you draw. for Line Weight. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. as shown. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Under Modify Subcategories. notice that there are no snaps active. verify that Chain is selected.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. In the New Subcategory dialog. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.rvt. click New. 2 Close the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. select 6. click Training Files. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 9 Beginning at the transformer. 8 On the Options Bar. expand Lines. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and then click OK. for Name. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the Line Styles dialog. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.

14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset.10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). enter 3mm. 11 Using the same method.

15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. as shown. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

31 While pressing Ctrl. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 29 Click Modify. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 33 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 28 Click above the cap. and select 1. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

36 Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

enter 3. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and press Enter. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 40 Press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.0. and press Enter. enter 12. enter 7. click on the length dimension value. for Offset. You enter exact values for each line length. and then press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. Using the same method. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. change the length of the bottom line to 3. you can ensure that they stay together. Press Esc.

and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 47 In the drawing area. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and click OK. 51 Using the method learned previously. 54 Select the group. select all 3 lines. while pressing Ctrl. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. enter Ground. for Name. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 46 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. 50 With the group selected. 52 Select the detail group. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.

57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and will place it on sheet E01. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. In later exercises. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .

3 Select the section box. 2 Zoom in to view the section. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Apply View Template. and then click the corner where the Top. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3D Views. Back.rvt. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and Left sides converge. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. for Name. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. 5 Right-click the copy.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). Walkthroughs. and click Rename. click Home. 4 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . and then press Esc. and double click Typical Make Up Air. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the ViewCube.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Typical. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . select 3D HVAC Iso. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Click OK. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Move the cursor down and to the left. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 15 Using the same method. and click to specify the second leader point. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown.■ ■ Under Names. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.

22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and under Extents. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. To rotate and reposition a text label. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Extents. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail.18 Press Esc. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and then click OK. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 23 Click on the crop region. select Crop Region Visible. as shown. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 19 Complete the text labels. as shown.

33 Right-click the view. 30 On the View Control Bar. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and under Extents.25 Click OK.rvt. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. select Crop View and Section Box. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. and click View Properties. 32 In the Instance Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 29 Right click the view. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. and click Activate View. clear Crop Region Visible. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Place a detail component. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and click Deactivate View. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and click OK. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. scroll down. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .

11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 In the drawing area. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. For View Classification. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. select Plumbing. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. For Scale. right-click the view name. as the rectangle start point. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. as shown. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Click OK. select Documentation. Click OK. 12 On the Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. and click Properties. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 3 In the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click the point at the top of the drain. select 1 : 5. 9 Zoom in to the component.

Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 22 Click Modify. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 21 In the drawing area. Concrete. for Type.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. select C. 18 With the filled region still selected. and then press Esc.I.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down.P. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 20 Select 1.

Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 23 In the drawing area. and then click to select them. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. select the filled region. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 31 On the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. (Line).

35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 40 Click Finish Region. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then press Esc.

press Tab to highlight the chain. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 45 Using the method learned previously. enter Flashing Membrane_F. for Name..D. and click OK.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw wide detail lines as shown. (Rectangle). 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select the Flashing Membrane group. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 49 Click Modify. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. and then click to select them. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.

press Spacebar twice. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 55 Press Esc.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method.

and use the grips to resize the masking region.62 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Leader and Free End. 67 On the Options Bar. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down.

79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and click to specify the second leader point. and click to specify the text insertion point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. select 15000 (Division 15 . 72 If necessary. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 78 Move the cursor to the left.70 In the Keynotes dialog. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and then click OK. 71 Click Modify. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 81 Select the text note. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 80 Press Esc twice. 76 To select the leader start point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide.

Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 88 In the drawing area. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc twice. and click to place it. 90 Press Esc. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. select the view title. open P103 .

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful